Post on 18-Apr-2015
Installation Instructions
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Catalog Number 1769-L31
Topic Page
Important User Information 2
Environment and Enclosure Information 3
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge 4
North American Hazardous Location Approval 5
Before You Begin 6
Connect the 1769-BA Battery 7
Install a 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 Industrial CompactFlash Card (optional) 8
Assemble the System 9
Lock and mount 9 12
Make RS-232 Connections to the Controller 15
Load the Controller Firmware 19
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating Mode 24
Specifications 28
Additional Resources 31
2 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences
Labels may be on or inside the equipment (for example drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
Labels may be on or inside the equipment (for example drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures
SHOCK HAZARD
BURN HAZARD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 3
Environment and Enclosure Information
ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1) at altitudes up to 2000 meters (6562 feet) without deratingThis equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IECCISPR Publication 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbanceThis equipment is supplied as open-type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA V2 V1 V0 (or equivalent) if non-metallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certificationsIn addition to this publication seebull Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication
1770-41 for additional installation requirements
bull NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
4 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that the area is nonhazardous before proceeding For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 5
North American Hazardous Location Approval
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations
Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux
Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest T number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation
Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent quagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque didentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons deacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de linstallation
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD -bull Do not disconnect equipment unless
power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2
bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION ndash bull Couper le courant ou sassurer
que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement
bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit
bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2
bull Sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
6 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Before You BeginUse this document as a guide for installing the controller
Consider the following when planning your CompactLogix system
bull The CompactLogix controller is always the leftmost module in the system
bull The controller must be located within four modules of the system power supply Some IO modules may be located up to eight modules away from the power supply See the documentation for your 1769 IO modules for details
bull The 1769-L31 controller supports as many as 16 IO modules in a maximum of 3 IO banks with 2 expansion cables
bull Each IO bank requires its own power supplybull Only one controller can be used in a CompactLogix systembull A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap is required to
terminate the end of the communication bus
These components ship with the controller
You can also use these components with the controllerbull 1756-CP3 or 1747-CP3 serial cable to connect a device to the
RS-232 portbull 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 industrial CompactFlash card to add
nonvolatile memory
IMPORTANT The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controller
Component Description
1769-BA battery
1747-KY controller key
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 7
Connect the 1769-BA BatteryThe controller is shipped with the 1769-BA battery packed separately To connect the battery follow this procedure
1 Remove the battery door by sliding it forward
2 Insert the battery connector into the black receptacle on the board
The connector is keyed for installation with the correct polarity
ATTENTION The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controllers The 1747-BA battery is not compatible with the 1769-L31 controllers and can cause problems
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceedingFor safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries Technical Data publication AG-54
IMPORTANT Do not remove the plastic insulation covering the battery The insulation is necessary to protect the battery contacts
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
8 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
3 Insert the battery into the door as shown
4 Slide the battery door back until it clicks into position
Install a 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 Industrial CompactFlash Card (optional)
The optional industrial CompactFlash card provides nonvolatile memory for a CompactLogix controller The card is not required for controller operation
Follow this procedure to install the card
1 Push the locking tab to the right
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 9
2 Insert the industrial CompactFlash card into the socket on the front of the controller noting that the label of the CompactFlash card faces toward the left
3 Match the orientation arrow on the card with the arrow on the front of the controller
4 To remove the CompactFlash card push the locking tab away from the CompactFlash card and pull the CompactFlash card from the socket
Assemble the SystemThe controller can be attached to an adjacent IO module or power supply before or after mounting
This procedure shows you how to install the controller in a CompactLogix system
1 Disconnect line power
WARNING The CompactLogix controller is not designed for removal and insertion under powerIf you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
2 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences
Labels may be on or inside the equipment (for example drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
Labels may be on or inside the equipment (for example drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures
SHOCK HAZARD
BURN HAZARD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 3
Environment and Enclosure Information
ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1) at altitudes up to 2000 meters (6562 feet) without deratingThis equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IECCISPR Publication 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbanceThis equipment is supplied as open-type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA V2 V1 V0 (or equivalent) if non-metallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certificationsIn addition to this publication seebull Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication
1770-41 for additional installation requirements
bull NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
4 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that the area is nonhazardous before proceeding For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 5
North American Hazardous Location Approval
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations
Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux
Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest T number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation
Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent quagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque didentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons deacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de linstallation
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD -bull Do not disconnect equipment unless
power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2
bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION ndash bull Couper le courant ou sassurer
que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement
bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit
bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2
bull Sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
6 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Before You BeginUse this document as a guide for installing the controller
Consider the following when planning your CompactLogix system
bull The CompactLogix controller is always the leftmost module in the system
bull The controller must be located within four modules of the system power supply Some IO modules may be located up to eight modules away from the power supply See the documentation for your 1769 IO modules for details
bull The 1769-L31 controller supports as many as 16 IO modules in a maximum of 3 IO banks with 2 expansion cables
bull Each IO bank requires its own power supplybull Only one controller can be used in a CompactLogix systembull A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap is required to
terminate the end of the communication bus
These components ship with the controller
You can also use these components with the controllerbull 1756-CP3 or 1747-CP3 serial cable to connect a device to the
RS-232 portbull 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 industrial CompactFlash card to add
nonvolatile memory
IMPORTANT The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controller
Component Description
1769-BA battery
1747-KY controller key
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 7
Connect the 1769-BA BatteryThe controller is shipped with the 1769-BA battery packed separately To connect the battery follow this procedure
1 Remove the battery door by sliding it forward
2 Insert the battery connector into the black receptacle on the board
The connector is keyed for installation with the correct polarity
ATTENTION The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controllers The 1747-BA battery is not compatible with the 1769-L31 controllers and can cause problems
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceedingFor safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries Technical Data publication AG-54
IMPORTANT Do not remove the plastic insulation covering the battery The insulation is necessary to protect the battery contacts
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
8 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
3 Insert the battery into the door as shown
4 Slide the battery door back until it clicks into position
Install a 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 Industrial CompactFlash Card (optional)
The optional industrial CompactFlash card provides nonvolatile memory for a CompactLogix controller The card is not required for controller operation
Follow this procedure to install the card
1 Push the locking tab to the right
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 9
2 Insert the industrial CompactFlash card into the socket on the front of the controller noting that the label of the CompactFlash card faces toward the left
3 Match the orientation arrow on the card with the arrow on the front of the controller
4 To remove the CompactFlash card push the locking tab away from the CompactFlash card and pull the CompactFlash card from the socket
Assemble the SystemThe controller can be attached to an adjacent IO module or power supply before or after mounting
This procedure shows you how to install the controller in a CompactLogix system
1 Disconnect line power
WARNING The CompactLogix controller is not designed for removal and insertion under powerIf you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 3
Environment and Enclosure Information
ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1) at altitudes up to 2000 meters (6562 feet) without deratingThis equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IECCISPR Publication 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbanceThis equipment is supplied as open-type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA V2 V1 V0 (or equivalent) if non-metallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certificationsIn addition to this publication seebull Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication
1770-41 for additional installation requirements
bull NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
4 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that the area is nonhazardous before proceeding For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 5
North American Hazardous Location Approval
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations
Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux
Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest T number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation
Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent quagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque didentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons deacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de linstallation
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD -bull Do not disconnect equipment unless
power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2
bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION ndash bull Couper le courant ou sassurer
que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement
bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit
bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2
bull Sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
6 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Before You BeginUse this document as a guide for installing the controller
Consider the following when planning your CompactLogix system
bull The CompactLogix controller is always the leftmost module in the system
bull The controller must be located within four modules of the system power supply Some IO modules may be located up to eight modules away from the power supply See the documentation for your 1769 IO modules for details
bull The 1769-L31 controller supports as many as 16 IO modules in a maximum of 3 IO banks with 2 expansion cables
bull Each IO bank requires its own power supplybull Only one controller can be used in a CompactLogix systembull A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap is required to
terminate the end of the communication bus
These components ship with the controller
You can also use these components with the controllerbull 1756-CP3 or 1747-CP3 serial cable to connect a device to the
RS-232 portbull 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 industrial CompactFlash card to add
nonvolatile memory
IMPORTANT The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controller
Component Description
1769-BA battery
1747-KY controller key
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 7
Connect the 1769-BA BatteryThe controller is shipped with the 1769-BA battery packed separately To connect the battery follow this procedure
1 Remove the battery door by sliding it forward
2 Insert the battery connector into the black receptacle on the board
The connector is keyed for installation with the correct polarity
ATTENTION The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controllers The 1747-BA battery is not compatible with the 1769-L31 controllers and can cause problems
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceedingFor safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries Technical Data publication AG-54
IMPORTANT Do not remove the plastic insulation covering the battery The insulation is necessary to protect the battery contacts
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
8 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
3 Insert the battery into the door as shown
4 Slide the battery door back until it clicks into position
Install a 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 Industrial CompactFlash Card (optional)
The optional industrial CompactFlash card provides nonvolatile memory for a CompactLogix controller The card is not required for controller operation
Follow this procedure to install the card
1 Push the locking tab to the right
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 9
2 Insert the industrial CompactFlash card into the socket on the front of the controller noting that the label of the CompactFlash card faces toward the left
3 Match the orientation arrow on the card with the arrow on the front of the controller
4 To remove the CompactFlash card push the locking tab away from the CompactFlash card and pull the CompactFlash card from the socket
Assemble the SystemThe controller can be attached to an adjacent IO module or power supply before or after mounting
This procedure shows you how to install the controller in a CompactLogix system
1 Disconnect line power
WARNING The CompactLogix controller is not designed for removal and insertion under powerIf you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
4 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that the area is nonhazardous before proceeding For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 5
North American Hazardous Location Approval
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations
Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux
Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest T number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation
Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent quagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque didentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons deacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de linstallation
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD -bull Do not disconnect equipment unless
power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2
bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION ndash bull Couper le courant ou sassurer
que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement
bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit
bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2
bull Sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
6 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Before You BeginUse this document as a guide for installing the controller
Consider the following when planning your CompactLogix system
bull The CompactLogix controller is always the leftmost module in the system
bull The controller must be located within four modules of the system power supply Some IO modules may be located up to eight modules away from the power supply See the documentation for your 1769 IO modules for details
bull The 1769-L31 controller supports as many as 16 IO modules in a maximum of 3 IO banks with 2 expansion cables
bull Each IO bank requires its own power supplybull Only one controller can be used in a CompactLogix systembull A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap is required to
terminate the end of the communication bus
These components ship with the controller
You can also use these components with the controllerbull 1756-CP3 or 1747-CP3 serial cable to connect a device to the
RS-232 portbull 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 industrial CompactFlash card to add
nonvolatile memory
IMPORTANT The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controller
Component Description
1769-BA battery
1747-KY controller key
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 7
Connect the 1769-BA BatteryThe controller is shipped with the 1769-BA battery packed separately To connect the battery follow this procedure
1 Remove the battery door by sliding it forward
2 Insert the battery connector into the black receptacle on the board
The connector is keyed for installation with the correct polarity
ATTENTION The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controllers The 1747-BA battery is not compatible with the 1769-L31 controllers and can cause problems
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceedingFor safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries Technical Data publication AG-54
IMPORTANT Do not remove the plastic insulation covering the battery The insulation is necessary to protect the battery contacts
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
8 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
3 Insert the battery into the door as shown
4 Slide the battery door back until it clicks into position
Install a 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 Industrial CompactFlash Card (optional)
The optional industrial CompactFlash card provides nonvolatile memory for a CompactLogix controller The card is not required for controller operation
Follow this procedure to install the card
1 Push the locking tab to the right
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 9
2 Insert the industrial CompactFlash card into the socket on the front of the controller noting that the label of the CompactFlash card faces toward the left
3 Match the orientation arrow on the card with the arrow on the front of the controller
4 To remove the CompactFlash card push the locking tab away from the CompactFlash card and pull the CompactFlash card from the socket
Assemble the SystemThe controller can be attached to an adjacent IO module or power supply before or after mounting
This procedure shows you how to install the controller in a CompactLogix system
1 Disconnect line power
WARNING The CompactLogix controller is not designed for removal and insertion under powerIf you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 5
North American Hazardous Location Approval
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations
Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux
Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest T number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation
Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent quagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque didentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons deacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de linstallation
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD -bull Do not disconnect equipment unless
power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2
bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION ndash bull Couper le courant ou sassurer
que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement
bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit
bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2
bull Sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
6 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Before You BeginUse this document as a guide for installing the controller
Consider the following when planning your CompactLogix system
bull The CompactLogix controller is always the leftmost module in the system
bull The controller must be located within four modules of the system power supply Some IO modules may be located up to eight modules away from the power supply See the documentation for your 1769 IO modules for details
bull The 1769-L31 controller supports as many as 16 IO modules in a maximum of 3 IO banks with 2 expansion cables
bull Each IO bank requires its own power supplybull Only one controller can be used in a CompactLogix systembull A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap is required to
terminate the end of the communication bus
These components ship with the controller
You can also use these components with the controllerbull 1756-CP3 or 1747-CP3 serial cable to connect a device to the
RS-232 portbull 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 industrial CompactFlash card to add
nonvolatile memory
IMPORTANT The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controller
Component Description
1769-BA battery
1747-KY controller key
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 7
Connect the 1769-BA BatteryThe controller is shipped with the 1769-BA battery packed separately To connect the battery follow this procedure
1 Remove the battery door by sliding it forward
2 Insert the battery connector into the black receptacle on the board
The connector is keyed for installation with the correct polarity
ATTENTION The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controllers The 1747-BA battery is not compatible with the 1769-L31 controllers and can cause problems
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceedingFor safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries Technical Data publication AG-54
IMPORTANT Do not remove the plastic insulation covering the battery The insulation is necessary to protect the battery contacts
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
8 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
3 Insert the battery into the door as shown
4 Slide the battery door back until it clicks into position
Install a 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 Industrial CompactFlash Card (optional)
The optional industrial CompactFlash card provides nonvolatile memory for a CompactLogix controller The card is not required for controller operation
Follow this procedure to install the card
1 Push the locking tab to the right
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 9
2 Insert the industrial CompactFlash card into the socket on the front of the controller noting that the label of the CompactFlash card faces toward the left
3 Match the orientation arrow on the card with the arrow on the front of the controller
4 To remove the CompactFlash card push the locking tab away from the CompactFlash card and pull the CompactFlash card from the socket
Assemble the SystemThe controller can be attached to an adjacent IO module or power supply before or after mounting
This procedure shows you how to install the controller in a CompactLogix system
1 Disconnect line power
WARNING The CompactLogix controller is not designed for removal and insertion under powerIf you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
6 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Before You BeginUse this document as a guide for installing the controller
Consider the following when planning your CompactLogix system
bull The CompactLogix controller is always the leftmost module in the system
bull The controller must be located within four modules of the system power supply Some IO modules may be located up to eight modules away from the power supply See the documentation for your 1769 IO modules for details
bull The 1769-L31 controller supports as many as 16 IO modules in a maximum of 3 IO banks with 2 expansion cables
bull Each IO bank requires its own power supplybull Only one controller can be used in a CompactLogix systembull A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap is required to
terminate the end of the communication bus
These components ship with the controller
You can also use these components with the controllerbull 1756-CP3 or 1747-CP3 serial cable to connect a device to the
RS-232 portbull 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 industrial CompactFlash card to add
nonvolatile memory
IMPORTANT The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controller
Component Description
1769-BA battery
1747-KY controller key
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 7
Connect the 1769-BA BatteryThe controller is shipped with the 1769-BA battery packed separately To connect the battery follow this procedure
1 Remove the battery door by sliding it forward
2 Insert the battery connector into the black receptacle on the board
The connector is keyed for installation with the correct polarity
ATTENTION The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controllers The 1747-BA battery is not compatible with the 1769-L31 controllers and can cause problems
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceedingFor safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries Technical Data publication AG-54
IMPORTANT Do not remove the plastic insulation covering the battery The insulation is necessary to protect the battery contacts
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
8 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
3 Insert the battery into the door as shown
4 Slide the battery door back until it clicks into position
Install a 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 Industrial CompactFlash Card (optional)
The optional industrial CompactFlash card provides nonvolatile memory for a CompactLogix controller The card is not required for controller operation
Follow this procedure to install the card
1 Push the locking tab to the right
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 9
2 Insert the industrial CompactFlash card into the socket on the front of the controller noting that the label of the CompactFlash card faces toward the left
3 Match the orientation arrow on the card with the arrow on the front of the controller
4 To remove the CompactFlash card push the locking tab away from the CompactFlash card and pull the CompactFlash card from the socket
Assemble the SystemThe controller can be attached to an adjacent IO module or power supply before or after mounting
This procedure shows you how to install the controller in a CompactLogix system
1 Disconnect line power
WARNING The CompactLogix controller is not designed for removal and insertion under powerIf you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 7
Connect the 1769-BA BatteryThe controller is shipped with the 1769-BA battery packed separately To connect the battery follow this procedure
1 Remove the battery door by sliding it forward
2 Insert the battery connector into the black receptacle on the board
The connector is keyed for installation with the correct polarity
ATTENTION The 1769-BA battery is the only battery you can use with the 1769-L31 controllers The 1747-BA battery is not compatible with the 1769-L31 controllers and can cause problems
WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceedingFor safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries Technical Data publication AG-54
IMPORTANT Do not remove the plastic insulation covering the battery The insulation is necessary to protect the battery contacts
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
8 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
3 Insert the battery into the door as shown
4 Slide the battery door back until it clicks into position
Install a 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 Industrial CompactFlash Card (optional)
The optional industrial CompactFlash card provides nonvolatile memory for a CompactLogix controller The card is not required for controller operation
Follow this procedure to install the card
1 Push the locking tab to the right
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 9
2 Insert the industrial CompactFlash card into the socket on the front of the controller noting that the label of the CompactFlash card faces toward the left
3 Match the orientation arrow on the card with the arrow on the front of the controller
4 To remove the CompactFlash card push the locking tab away from the CompactFlash card and pull the CompactFlash card from the socket
Assemble the SystemThe controller can be attached to an adjacent IO module or power supply before or after mounting
This procedure shows you how to install the controller in a CompactLogix system
1 Disconnect line power
WARNING The CompactLogix controller is not designed for removal and insertion under powerIf you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
8 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
3 Insert the battery into the door as shown
4 Slide the battery door back until it clicks into position
Install a 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 Industrial CompactFlash Card (optional)
The optional industrial CompactFlash card provides nonvolatile memory for a CompactLogix controller The card is not required for controller operation
Follow this procedure to install the card
1 Push the locking tab to the right
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash Card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 9
2 Insert the industrial CompactFlash card into the socket on the front of the controller noting that the label of the CompactFlash card faces toward the left
3 Match the orientation arrow on the card with the arrow on the front of the controller
4 To remove the CompactFlash card push the locking tab away from the CompactFlash card and pull the CompactFlash card from the socket
Assemble the SystemThe controller can be attached to an adjacent IO module or power supply before or after mounting
This procedure shows you how to install the controller in a CompactLogix system
1 Disconnect line power
WARNING The CompactLogix controller is not designed for removal and insertion under powerIf you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 9
2 Insert the industrial CompactFlash card into the socket on the front of the controller noting that the label of the CompactFlash card faces toward the left
3 Match the orientation arrow on the card with the arrow on the front of the controller
4 To remove the CompactFlash card push the locking tab away from the CompactFlash card and pull the CompactFlash card from the socket
Assemble the SystemThe controller can be attached to an adjacent IO module or power supply before or after mounting
This procedure shows you how to install the controller in a CompactLogix system
1 Disconnect line power
WARNING The CompactLogix controller is not designed for removal and insertion under powerIf you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
10 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Check that the lever of the adjacent module (A) is in the unlocked (fully right) position
3 Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (B) to secure the modules together
4 Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors line up with each other
5 Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the modulersquos bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (C)
6 Move the modulersquos bus lever fully to the left (D) until it clicks being sure it is locked firmly in place
7 Attach an end cap terminator (E) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before
8 Lock the end cap bus terminator (F)
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
F
E
D
C
B
B
A
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 11
Mount the SystemMaintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 mm (2 in) of space on all sides as shown This provides ventilation and electrical isolation Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure
ATTENTION When attaching the controller power supply and IO modules make sure the bus connectors are securely locked together to be sure of proper electrical connection
IMPORTANT When mounting the CompactLogix system either use screws to panel mount system or use DIN rail Do not use both Use of both mounting methods may cause hardware damage and cause the system to fail
ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the controller Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the controller is energized
Side
Top
Com
pact
Logi
x Co
ntro
ller
Pow
er S
uppl
y
End
Cap
50 (197)
50 (197)
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
Com
pact
IO
Mod
ule
50 (197)
Bottom
Side
50 (197)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
12 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Product Dimensions
Dimensions are in mm (in) in the figure Hole spacing tolerance is + 04 mm (0016 in)
IMPORTANT Compact IO expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end caps Expansion cables can be used on either the right or left end A 1769-ECR right end cap or 1769-ECL left end cap terminates the end of the communication bus
525 (207)
118 (465)
35 (138)
35 (138)
35 (138)
132 (520)
15 (59)
525 (206)
675 (268)
70 (276)
35 (138)
35 (138)
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 13
Panel Mounting
Mount the controller to a panel by using two screws per module Use M4 or 8 panhead screws Mounting screws are required on every module
This procedure lets you use the assembled modules as a template for drilling holes in the panel Due to module mounting hole tolerance it is important to follow these procedures
1 On a clean work surface assemble no more than three modules
2 Using the assembled modules as a template carefully mark the center of all module-mounting holes on the panel
3 Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface including any previously mounted modules
4 Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or 8 screw
5 Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment
IMPORTANT The grounding tab located where you install the mounting screws enables the module to be grounded when it is panel-mounted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
14 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
6 Attach the modules to the panel by using the mounting screws
7 Repeat steps 16 for any remaining modules
DIN Rail Mounting
The controller can be mounted on the following DIN rails
bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 75 mm (138 x 030 in)bull EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (138 x 059 in)
Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latches Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail The latches will momentarily open and lock into place
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Additional grounding connections from the controllerrsquos grounding tab or DIN rail (if used) are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 for additional information
IMPORTANT If mounting more modules mount only the last one of this group and put the others aside This reduces remounting time when you are drilling and tapping the next group of modules
ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (for example aluminum or plastic) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm (78 in) and use end-anchors appropriately
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 15
Make RS-232 Connections to the ControllerConnect the 9-pin female end of the serial cable to the serial port of the controller
Follow this procedure to connect to the serial port
1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator
Channel 0 is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 is nonisolated If you connect channel 1 to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator (such as the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter) between the controller and device
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installationsBe sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
16 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
2 Select the appropriate cableIsolator Use Cable
No The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller
If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell surrounding the pins on the ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable
Port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE
Communication Rate Selector Switch
Port 2 Mini-DIN 8 RS-232
DC Power Source Selector Switch
Terminals for External 24V DC Power Supply
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
2 RDX
3 TXD
4 DTR
COMMON
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
1 CD
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 17
Default Serial Configuration
Channel 0 and Channel 1 (both serial ports) have the following default communication configuration
Yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable
Parameter Default
Protocol DF1 Full-duplex
Communication Rate 192 Kbps
Parity None
Station Address 0
Control Lines No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Isolator Use Cable
DB-9 Right-angle or Straight Cable End 8-pin Mini-DIN Cable End
Pin DB-9 End Mini-DIN End
1 DCD DCD
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD
4 DTR DTR
5 Ground Ground
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 NA NA
1 2
34
5
6 7867
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
18 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the Channel 0 Default Communication Push Button
The Channel 0 default communication push button is located on the front of the controller in the lower right corner as shown in the illustration Use the Channel 0 default communication push button to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default Communication mode The Channel 0 default communication (DCH0) status indicator turns on (green steady) to indicate that the default communication configuration is active
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled
ACK Timeout 50 (x 20 ms)
NAK Receive Limit 3 Retries
ENQ Transmit Limit 3 Retries
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
IMPORTANT Only Channel 0 has a default communication push button
IMPORTANT The default communication push button is recessed Before pressing the default communication push button be sure to note the present communication configuration for Channel 0 Pushing the default communication push button resets all configured parameters back to their default settingsTo return the channel to its user-configured parameters you must enter them manually while online with the controller or download them as part of an RSLogix 5000 software project file To do this online with RSLogix 5000 software access the Controller Properties dialog box and enter parameters on the Serial Port System Protocol and User Protocol tabs
Parameter Default
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 19
Install the Appropriate EDS FilesIf you have RSLinx software version 242 or later the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an earlier version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files
You need EDS files for these devices
bull 1769-L31 controllerbull 1769 CompactBusbull 1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the controller EDS file that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware In order to update the firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file (0001000E00410100eds) installed for the controller
The EDS files are available on the RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software CD The files are also available at httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Load the Controller Firmware
The controller ships without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller
To load firmware you can use the following
bull ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
bull AutoFlash utility that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
bull CompactFlash card (catalog number 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128) with valid memory already loaded
If you use the ControlFlash or AutoFlash utilities you need a serial connection to the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
20 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
The firmware is available with RSLogix 5000 software or you can download it from the support website at httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Follow these steps to download firmware from the support website
1 In the left column (frame) click Technical Support
2 Click Firmware Updates
3 Select the firmware revision
4 Enter the serial number of your RSLogix 5000 programming software
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 21
Using the ControlFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the ControlFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Start the ControlFlash utility
3 From the Welcome dialog box click Next
4 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
5 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
6 Choose the controller and click OK7 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller
and click Next
8 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
9 Click OK
10 To close the ControlFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
22 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Using the AutoFlash Utility to Load Firmware
You can use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware through a serial connection
1 Make sure the appropriate network connection is made before starting
2 Use RSLogix 5000 programming software to create a controller project
This automatically launches the AutoFlash utility
3 Choose the catalog number of the controller and click Next
4 Expand the network until you see the controller
If the required network is not shown configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software
5 Choose the controller and click OK
6 Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and click Next
7 To start the update of the controller click Finish and Yes
After the controller is updated the status dialog box displays Update complete
8 Click OK
9 To close the AutoFlash utility click Cancel and Yes
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 23
Using a CompactFlash Card to Load Firmware
If you have an existing controller that is already configured and has firmware loaded you can store the current controller user program and firmware on the CompactFlash card and use that card to update other controllers
1 Use RSLogix 5000 software to store the controller user program and firmware of a currently configured controller to the CompactFlash card
2 From the Controller Properties dialog box click the Nonvolatile Memory tab
3 Click Load Image On Powerup when you save to the card
4 Remove the card and insert it into a controller that will use the same firmware and controller user program
When you apply power to the second controller the image stored on the CompactFlash card is loaded into the controller
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
24 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Select the Controllerrsquos Operating ModeUse the keyswitch on the front panel of the controller to determine the controllerrsquos operating mode
Keyswitch Position
Description
RUN bullUpload projects
bullRun the program and enable outputs
bullYou cannot create or delete tasks programs or routines You cannot create or delete tags or edit online while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
bullYou cannot change the mode by using the programming software while the keyswitch is in the RUN position
PROG bullDisable outputs
bullUploaddownload projects
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
bullYou cannot change the mode through the programming software while the keyswitch is in the PROG position
REM bullUploaddownload projects
bullChange between Remote Program Remote Test and Remote Run modes through the programming software
Remote Run bullThe controller executes (scans) tasks
bullEnable outputs
bullEdit online
Remote Program bullDisable outputs
bullCreate modify and delete tasks programs or routines
bullDownload projects
bullEdit online
bullThe controller does not execute (scan) tasks
Remote Test bullExecute tasks with outputs disabled
bullEdit online
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 25
Controller Status IndicatorsIndicator Status Description
RUN Off The controller is in Program or Test mode
Solid green The controller is in RUN mode
FORCE Off No tags contain IO force valuesIO forces are inactive (disabled)
Solid amber IO forces are active (enabled)IO force values may or may not exist
Flashing amber One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled
BAT Off The battery supports memory
Solid red Either the battery isbull not installedbull 95 discharged and should be replaced
IO Off Eitherbull there are no devices in the IO configuration of the controllerbull the controller does not contain a project (controller memory is
empty)
Solid green The controller is communicating with all the devices in its IO configuration
Flashing green One or more devices in the IO configuration of the controller are not responding
Flashing red The controller is not communicating to any devicesThe controller is faulted
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
26 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
OK Off No power is applied
Flashing red If the controller is new the controller requires a firmware updateIf the controller is not new a major fault occurred To clear the fault either
bull turn the keyswitch from Prog to RUN to PROG
bull go online with RSLogix 5000 software
Solid red The controller detected a nonrecoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Follow these steps to recover
1 Cycle power to the chassis2 Download the project3 Change to RUN mode
If the OK status indicator remains solid red contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor
Solid green Controller is OK
Flashing green The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory
Indicator Status Description
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 27
RS-232 Serial Port Status Indicators (Channel 0 and 1)
CompactFlash Card Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
DCH0 Off Channel 0 is configured differently than the default serial configuration
Solid green Channel 0 has the default serial configuration
CH0 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
CH1 Off No RS-232 activity
Flashing green RS-232 activity
ATTENTION Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the controller is reading from or writing to the card as indicated by a flashing green CF status indicator This could corrupt the data on the card or in the controller as well as corrupt the latest firmware in the controller
Indicator Status Description
CF Off No activity
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card
Flashing red CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
28 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Specifications
CompactLogix Controller - 1769-L31
Attribute Value
Communication ports CH0 - RS-232 CH1 - RS-232RS-232 RS-232 DF1 DH-485 ASCII DF1 DH-485 fully isolated nonisolated 384 Kbps max 384 Kbps max
User memory 512 KB
Nonvolatile memory 1784-CF64 or 1784-CF128 CompactFlash card
Number of IO modules max 16 IO modules
Number of IO banks max 3 banks
Backplane current 330 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 24V DC
Power dissipation 261 W
Power supply distance rating 4 (The controller must be within four slot positions of the power supply)
North American temp code T5
Battery 1769-BA
Weight approx 030 kg (066 lb)
Programming cable 1747-CP3 or 1756-CP3
Panel mounting screw torque(using M4 or 8 screws)
1118 Nbullm (1016 lbbullin)
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
Wiring category 2 on communication ports(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation TypeType tested at 710V DC for 60 s RS232 channel 0 to systemNo isolation between RS232 channel 1 and system
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 29
Environmental Specifications
Attribute Value
Operational TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
060 degC (32 140 degF)
Storage TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold) IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat) IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Thermal Shock)
-4085 degC (-40 185 degF)
Relative HumidityIEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
595 noncondensing
VibrationIEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
5 g 10500 Hz
ShockIEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
DIN rail mountPanel mount
Operating 20 g Nonoperating 30 gOperating 30 g Nonoperating 40 g
Emissions - CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity - IEC61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges
Radiated RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-3 10Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 802000 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900 MHz
10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 1890 MHz
EFTB Immunity - IEC 61000-4-4 +2 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports
Surge Transient Immunity - IEC61000-4-5 Channel 0 plusmn2 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Channel 1 plusmn1 kV line-earth (CM) on shielded communication ports
Conducted RF Immunity - IEC61000-4-6 10V rms with 1kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHz80 MHz
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
30 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller
Certifications
Certifications(1) (when product is marked)
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant withbull EN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bull EN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bull EN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bull EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant withbull ASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
(1) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller 31
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
CompactLogix System User Manual publication 1769-UM011
Describes planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your CompactLogix system
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756-PM001
Describes developing projects for Logix5000 controllers
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM003
Describes programming the controller for sequential applications
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756-RM006
Describes programming the controller for process or drives applications
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA
Describes wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley Compact IO ControlFlash CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1769-IN069C-EN-P - May 2008 PN -26300Supersedes Publication 1769-IN069B-EN-P - June2007 Copyright copy 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1769-IN069C-EN-P | 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021 | 42508 | 5 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | 32 | 32 | 32 | PLAIN | 20 | White | NA | 475 x 7 | 475 x 7 | SIDE | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black | PN-26300 |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1769-IN069C-EN-P | 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021 | 42508 | 5 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | 32 | 32 | 32 | PLAIN | 20 | White | NA | 475 x 7 | 475 x 7 | SIDE | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black | PN-26300 |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1769-IN069C-EN-P | 1769-L31 CompactLogix Controller | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | CMKMAY IA ControlVisNet - 19021 | 42508 | 5 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | 32 | 32 | 32 | PLAIN | 20 | White | NA | 475 x 7 | 475 x 7 | SIDE | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black | PN-26300 |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |